Samsung HW-H751 320 W 4.1 Ch Dolby Soundbar HW-H751 User's manual
HW-H750 HW-H751 User manual Wireless Audio - Soundbar Imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive a more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register FEATURES FEATURES TV SoundConnect TV SoundConnect lets you listen to audio from your TV on your Soundbar via a Bluetooth connection and lets you control the sound. HDMI HDMI transmits video and audio signals simultaneously, and provides a clearer picture. The unit is also equipped with the ARC function which lets you listen to sound from your TV through the Soundbar via an HDMI cable. This function is only available if you connect the unit to an ARC compliant TV. Surround Sound Expansion The Surround Sound Expansion feature adds depth and spaciousness to your listening experience. Surround Sound Expansion is powered by Sonic Emotion. Wireless Subwoofer Samsung’s wireless module does away with cables running between the main unit and the subwoofer. Instead, the subwoofer connects to a compact wireless module that communicates with the main unit. Special Sound Effects You can select different Sound Effects - CINEMA / SPORTS / VOICE / MUSIC / STANDARD (Original Sound) depending on the type of content you want to enjoy. Multi-function Remote Control You can use the supplied remote control to control various operations with the simple press of a button. USB Host Support You can connect and play music files from external USB storage devices such as MP3 players, USB flash memory, etc. using the Soundbar's USB HOST function. Bluetooth Function You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires! NFC Connect your NFC compatible device via Bluetooth to the Soundbar using this simple set-up procedure and play music on the device through the Soundbar. It is supported in some area’s models only. Multiroom Link Once the Soundbar is connected to a smart device with Multiroom Link App, you can connect multiple Samsung Multiroom devices together wirelessly. LICENSES Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. - To send inquiries and requests regarding open sources, contact Samsung via Email ([email protected]). 2 SAFETY INFORMATION SAFETY INFORMATION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol indicates “dangerous voltage” inside the product that presents a risk of electric shock or personal injury. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN This symbol indicates important instructions accompanying the product. WARNING : To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. CAUTION : TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. • This apparatus shall always be connected to a AC outlet with a protective grounding connection. • To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable. CAUTION • Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases on the apparatus. • To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the power plug must be easily and readily accessible at all times. 3 ENG SAFETY WARNINGS SAFETY INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS 68.6 mm 99.1mm 99.1mm 99.1mm Ensure that the AC power supply in your house complies with the power requirements listed on the identification sticker located on the back of your product. Install your product horizontally, on a suitable base (furniture), with enough space around it for ventilation 7~10 cm. Make sure the ventilation slots are not covered. Do not place the unit on amplifiers or other equipment which may become hot. This unit is designed for continuous use. To fully turn off the unit, disconnect the AC plug from the wall outlet. Unplug the unit if you intend to leave it unused for a long period of time. During thunderstorms thunderstorms, disconnect the AC plug fro from the wall outlet. Voltage peaks due to lightning could damage the unit. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight or other heat sources. This could lead to overheating and cause the unit to malfunction. Protect the product from moisture (i.e. (i e vases), vases) and an excess heat (e.g. a fireplace) or equipment creating strong magnetic or electric fields. Disconnect the power cable from the AC supply if the unit malfunctions. Your product is not intended for industrial use. It is for personal use only. Condensation may occur if your product has been stored in cold temperatures. If transporting the unit during the winter, wait approximately 2 hours until the unit has reached room temperature before using. The batteries used with this product contain chem chemicals that are harmful to the environment. Do not dispose of batteries in the general household trash. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. Do not short circuit, disassemble, or overheat the batteries. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. 4 CONTENTS CONTENTS ENG 2 FEATURES 17 FUNCTIONS 2 Licenses 17 Input Mode 17 ARC (HDMI OUT) 3 SAFETY INFORMATION 18 Bluetooth 3 Safety Warnings 20 NFC 4 Precautions 21 TV SoundConnect 22 USB 6 GETTING STARTED 23 Using the Network Standby On function 6 Before reading the User’s Manual 23 Using the AUTO POWER LINK Function 6 What’s Included 24 Using the Multiroom Link 26 Software update 7 DESCRIPTIONS 7 Front/Bottom Panel 8 Rear Panel 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 28 APPENDIX 9 REMOTE CONTROL 9 Remote Control Buttons and Functions 28 Specifications 11 CONNECTIONS 11 Installing the Wall Mount 12 Detaching the Wall Mount 12 Installing the bracket without referring to the Wall-mount Installation Guide 13 Connecting the Wireless Subwoofer 15 Connecting an External Device using an HDMI cable 16 Connecting an External Device using Optical (digital) cable or Audio (analogue) cable 16 Assembling the Cable Clip ● Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. ● An administration fee may be charged if either (a) an engineer is called out at your request and there is no defect with the product (i.e. where the user manual has not been read). (b) you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is no defect with the product (i.e. where the user manual has not been read). ● You will be informed of the administration fee amount before a technician visits. 5 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED BEFORE READING THE USER’S MANUAL Note the following terms before reading the user manual. + Icons used in this manual Icon Term Caution Note Definition Indicates a situation where a function does not operate or settings may be canceled. Indicates tips or instructions on the page that help you operate a function. + Safety Instructions and Troubleshooting 1) Be sure to familiarise yourself with the Safety Instructions before using this product. (See page 3) 2) If a problem occurs, check Troubleshooting. (See page 27) + Copyright ©2014 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved; no part of this user’s manual may be reproduced or copied without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. WHAT’S INCLUDED Check for the supplied accessories shown below. (Wall Mount L: 1EA) (Wall Mount R: 1EA) Remote Control / Lithium Battery (3V : CR2032) User Manual Bracket-Wall Mount Wall Mount Guide Holder-Screw Power Cord DC Adapter NFC Sticker AUX Cable Cable Clip (Holder-screw1: 2EA) (Holder-screw2: 2EA) ● The appearance of the accessories may differ slightly from the illustrations above. 6 HW-H750_H751_XS,XL_ENG_141028.indd 6 2014-10-28 10:47:06 DESCRIPTIONS DESCRIPTIONS ENG FRONT/BOTTOM PANEL AUX IN (Function) Button Connect to the Analogue output of an external device. Selects the D.IN, AUX, HDMI, BT, TV, USB input. ) ● While the unit is powered on, pressing the ( button for more than 3 seconds sets the button to act as MUTE button. To cancel MUTE button setup, ) button for more than 3 seconds press the ( again. (USB Port) Connect USB devices such as MP3 players here to play files on the devices. AUX IN VACUUM TUBE AMP AUX Display Volume +/- Displays the current mode. ● If there is no input from the product or remote control for 15 seconds, the display will turn off automatically. ● The display will not turn off automatically in BT READY, TV READY, and USB Playing modes. Controls the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. (Power) Button Turns the Soundbar on and off. ● When you turn on this unit, there will be a 10 to 12 second delay before it produces sound. ● Do not bring cellular phones or mobile devices near the vacuum tube amp, or put other electronic devices on the top of the product. Signals from these devices can cause noise or distortion in the audio. ● Do not let children touch the product's surface when the set is on. It will be hot. ● Open the USB COVER to use USB or AUX port. 7 DESCRIPTIONS REAR PANEL WPS/Wi-Fi SETUP Button Press this button to connect your Soundbar to your network using WPS or Wi-Fi setup. DC 24V (Power Supply In) Connect the DC power adaptor to the power supply jack, and then connect the AC power adaptor plug to a wall outlet. SPK ADD Button Press the button to connect Soundbar to the HUB. (not supplied) LAN Lets you connect to a network using a LAN cable. HDMI IN Inputs digital video and audio signals simultaneously using an HDMI cable. Use when connecting a supported external device. HDMI OUT (TV) Outputs digital video and audio signals simultaneously using an HDMI cable. OPTICAL IN Connect to the digital (optical) output of an external device. ● When disconnecting the power cable of the AC power adaptor from the wall outlet, pull the plug. Do not pull the cable. ● Do not connect this unit or other components to an AC outlet until all connections between components are complete. 8 REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL SOURCE Press to select a source connected to the Soundbar. MUTE You can turn the volume down to 0 with the push of a button. Press again to restore the sound to the previous volume level. REPEAT Press to set the REPEAT function during music playback from a USB device. REPEAT OFF : Cancels Repeat Playback. REPEAT FILE : Repeatedly play a track. REPEAT ALL : Repeatedly play all tracks. REPEAT RANDOM : Plays tracks in random order. (A track that has already been played may be played again.) Skip Forward If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press the $ button, the next file is selected. AUDIO SYNC If the Soundbar is connected to a digital TV and the video appears out of sync with the audio, press the AUDIO SYNC buttons to sync the audio with the video. Use the #,$ buttons to set the audio delay between 0 ms and 300 ms. In USB mode, TV mode, and BT mode, the Audio Sync function may not work. You can also activate Wi-Fi SETUP function by pressing and holding AUDIO SYNC button on the remote for over 7 seconds. DIMMER/Anynet+ DIMMER : Press the DIMMER/Anynet+ button to control the brightness of the VACUUM TUBE AMP. DIMMER does not function for 30 seconds after you turn on the product for the very first time. Anynet+ : Press and hold the DIMMER/Anynet+ button for more than 5 seconds to turn the Anynet+ function and AUTO POWER LINK function on or off. The Anynet+ function lets you control the Soundbar with the remote from an Anynet+ compatible Samsung TV. The Soundbar must be connected to the TV via an HDMI cable. See page 23 for details about AUTO POWER LINK. TREBLE BASS Press to select Treble or Bass. Then, use the #,$ button to adjust the Treble or Bass volume from -3 to +3. ● Soundbar is a Samsung proprietary name. ● Operate the TV using the TV's remote control. 9 ENG REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS AND FUNCTIONS REMOTE CONTROL POWER Turns the Soundbar on and off. VOLUME Adjusts the volume level of the unit. Skip Back If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press the # button, the previous file is selected. Play/Pause Press the ► button to pause playing the file temporarily. Press the ► button again to play the selected file. SOUND EFFECT Press to select a sound effect mode. Select the STANDARD mode if you want to enjoy the original sound. When you choose a Sound Effect mode (except STANDARD), Surround Sound Expansion will automatically be turned OFF. WOOFER You can control the woofer volume. Press the #,$ button to increase or decrease the subwoofer volume. You can set it from SW -6 to SW +6. You can also activate SPK ADD function of the soundbar by pressing and holding WOOFER button of the remote for over 5 seconds. Surr.Sound (Surround Sound Expansion) Press the Surr.Sound button on the remote to add depth and spaciousness to the sound. When you select SURROUND SOUND AUTO: If the sound source has more than 2 channels, SURROUND SOUND ON turns on automatically. If the sound source has 2 channels (stereo) or less, SURROUND SOUND OFF is selected automatically. You can also activate WPS function by pressing and holding Surr.Sound button on the remote for over 5 seconds. + Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control 1. Use a suitable coin to turn the remote control's battery cover counterclockwise to remove it as shown in the figure above. 2. Insert a 3V lithium battery. Keep the positive (+) pole facing up when inserting the battery. Put the battery cover on and align the '' marks side by side as shown in the figure above. 10 3. Use a suitable coin to turn the remote control battery cover clockwise as far as it will go to fix it in place. CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS ENG INSTALLING THE WALL MOUNT You can use the wall mount bracket to mount this unit on a wall. + Installation Precautions ● Install on a vertical wall only. ● For the installation, avoid a location with high temperature or humidity, or a wall that cannot sustain the weight of the set. ● Check the strength of the wall. If the wall is not strong enough to support the unit, reinforce the wall or install the unit on a different wall that can support the unit's weight. 5 cm or more ● Purchase and use the fixing screws or anchors appropriate for the kind of wall you have (plaster board, iron board, wood, etc.). If possible, fix the support screws into wall studs. ● Purchase wall mounting screws according to the type and thickness of the wall you will mount the Soundbar on. - Diameter : M5 - Length: L 35 mm or longer recommended ● Connect cables from the unit to external devices before you install it on the wall. ● Make sure the unit is turned off and unplugged before you install it. Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock. 1. Place the installation guide against the wall surface. • The installation guide must be level. • Install at least 5 cm below the TV, if the TV is mounted on the wall. 2. Mark the location where the screws will go through on the wall using a pen, and then remove the installation guide. 3. Fasten the wall mounts and screws to the marked locations. • The left and right mounts are different shapes. 4. Secure the two holder screws to the screw holes on the back of the Soundbar's main body, one on the left and one on the right. AUX 5. Dust may be introduced into the Soundbar's inside if mounted on the wall. Make sure to keep the USB COVER closed. 6. Set the holder screws on the back of the Soundbar into the grooves of the wall mount. For safe installation, make sure to push the holder screws all the way to the bottom of the grooves. Using the Soundbar with Wall Mount [Wall Mounting the Soundbar] 11 CONNECTIONS DETACHING THE WALL MOUNT 1. Pull the Soundbar upwards as shown in the figure to separate it from the wall mount. Using the Soundbar with Wall Mount [Detaching the Soundbar from the Wall Mount] ● Do not hang onto the installed unit and avoid striking or dropping the unit. ● Secure the unit firmly to the wall so that it does not fall off. If the unit falls off, it may cause an injury or damage the product. ● When the unit is installed on a wall, please make sure that children do not pull any of the connecting cables, as it may cause it to fall. ● For the optimal performance of a wall mount installation, install the speaker system at least 5 cm below the TV, if the TV is mounted on the wall. ● For your safety, if you do not mount the unit on the wall, install it on a secure, flat surface where it is unlikely to fall. INSTALLING THE BRACKET WITHOUT REFERRING TO THE WALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION GUIDE 5 cm or more 5 cm or more 16 cm 17.5 cm Minimum 32.8 ~ 33.5 cm 1. Place the “Wall Mount L” on the desired wall surface while paralleled to the floor as shown above, and fix a screw through the hole on its right end. 2. Place the “Wall Mount R” on the desired wall surface while paralleled to the floor as shown above, and fix a screw through the hole on its left end. • If Wall Mount L/R are to be mounted beneath the TV, check their fixing hole positions in steps 1 and 2, so that they are aligned appropriately to the center of the TV’s bottom. 3. Fix screws through the rest of holes. 12 CONNECTIONS CONNECTING THE WIRELESS SUBWOOFER 1. Plug the power cords of the main unit and subwoofer into an AC wall outlet. 2. Confirm that the main unit is off (in STANDBY Mode). 3. Press the ID SET button on the back of the subwoofer with a small, pointed object for 5 seconds. • The LINK indicator (Blue LED) on the subwoofer blinks quickly. 4. While the main unit is powered off (in STANDBY mode), press and hold the MUTE ( 5 seconds. ) on the remote control for 5. The ID SET message appears on the Soundbar's display. 6. To finalise the link, turn the main unit’s power on while the subwoofer’s LINK LED blinks. • The main unit and the subwoofer should now be linked (connected). • The LINK indicator (blue LED) on the subwoofer should be on and solid blue. • If the LINK indicator is not solid blue, the linking process has failed. Turn off the main unit and start again from Step 2. • You can enjoy better sound from the wireless subwoofer by selecting a Sound Effect. (See page 10) 13 ENG The Subwoofer's linking ID is preset at the factory and the main unit and subwoofer should link (connect wirelessly) automatically when the main unit and subwoofer are turned on. If the LINK indicator does not light when the main unit and subwoofer are turned on, please set the ID by following the procedure below. Complete this process within 30 seconds after the Link Indicator on the subwoofer starts blinking. CONNECTIONS ● Before moving or installing the product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord. ● If the main unit is powered off, the wireless subwoofer will be in standby mode and the STANDBY LED on the upper side will come on after the LINK indicator (Blue LED) blinks for 30 seconds. ● If you use a device that uses the same frequency (2.4GHz) as the Soundbar near the Soundbar, interference may cause some sound interruption. ● The transmission distance of the wireless signal between the main unit and subwoofer is about 10 m, but may vary depending on your operating environment. If a steel-concrete or metallic wall is between the main unit and the wireless subwoofer, the system may not operate at all, because the wireless signal cannot penetrate metal. ● If the main unit doesn't make a wireless connection, follow steps 1-6 to re-set the connection between the main unit and wireless subwoofer. ● The wireless receiving antenna is built into the wireless subwoofer. Keep the unit away from water and moisture. ● For optimal listening performance, make sure that the area around the wireless subwoofer location is clear of any obstructions. 14 CONNECTIONS CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING AN HDMI CABLE HDMI IN HDMI OUT HDMI Cable (not supplied) Digital Devices HDMI IN HDMI OUT (TV) HDMI Cable (not supplied) HDMI IN ARC (HDMI OUT) Connect an HDMI cable (not supplied) from the HDMI IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT jack on your digital device. The ARC function allows digital audio to output via the HDMI OUT (ARC) port. It can be enabled only when the Soundbar is connected to a TV that supports the ARC function. and, ● Anynet+ must be turned on. ● This function is not available if the HDMI cable does not support ARC. HDMI OUT (TV) Connect an HDMI cable (not supplied) from the HDMI OUT (TV) jack on the back of the product to the HDMI IN jack on your TV. ● HDMI is an interface that enables the digital transmission of video and audio data with just a single connector. 15 ENG HDMI is the standard digital interface for connecting to such TVs, projectors, DVD players, Blu-ray players, set top boxes, and more. Because HDMI transmits the highest quality digital signal, you can enjoy superior video and audio - as it was originally created at the digital source. CONNECTIONS CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING OPTICAL (DIGITAL) CABLE OR AUDIO (ANALOGUE) CABLE This unit comes equipped with one optical in digital jack and one audio Analogue in jack, giving you two ways to connect it to a TV. OPTICAL OUT OPTICAL IN Optical Cable (not supplied) BD/ DVD player/ Set-top box/ Game console AUDIO OUT AUX IN Audio Cable OPTICAL IN or, Connect the OPTICAL IN (Audio) on the main unit to the OPTICAL OUT jack of the TV or Source Device. Change the function to D.IN. AUX IN Connect AUX IN (Audio) on the main unit to the AUDIO OUT jack of the TV or Source Device. Change the function to AUX. ● Do not connect the power cord of this product or your TV to the wall outlet until all connections between components are complete. ● Before moving or installing this product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord. ASSEMBLING THE CABLE CLIP DC 24V DC 24V Attach the cable clip to the unit as shown, and then run the cables through the clip to keep them neat. 16 HW-H750_H751_SQ_ENG_141024.indd 16 2014-10-24 4:57:05 FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS ENG INPUT MODE Press the ( ) button on the main unit’s front panel or the mode you want. (SOURCE) button on the remote control to select the The unit turns off automatically in the following situations: Input mode Display Optical Digital input D.IN AUX input AUX HDMI input HDMI - If there is no KEY input for 8 hours when the AUX cable is connected. BLUETOOTH mode BT - If the AUX cable is disconnected for 15 minutes. TV SoundConnect TV USB mode USB ● D.IN/HDMI/BT/TV/USB/ARC Mode - If there is no audio signal for 15 minutes. ● AUX Mode ● To disable Auto Power down Off, press the & button for over 5 seconds in AUX mode. ARC (HDMI OUT) ARC (Audio Return Channel) transfers digital audio signal to the HDMI OUT (ARC) port. HDMI Cable 1. Connect the TV supporting ARC to the Soundbar with an HDMI cable. 2. Turn on the TV, and turn on the Soundbar’s Anynet+. ) button on the main unit’s front panel or the 3. Press the ( the D.IN mode. (SOURCE) button on the remote control to select ● If the HDMI cable does not support ARC feature, ARC may not work properly. ● To turn off the ARC function, turn Anynet+ off. 17 HW-H750_H751_XS,XL_ENG_141028.indd 17 2014-10-28 10:47:30 FUNCTIONS BLUETOOTH You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires! + To connect the Soundbar to a Bluetooth device Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth compliant stereo headset function. Connect Bluetooth device ) button on the main unit’s front panel 1. Press the ( (SOURCE) button on the remote control or the to select the BT mode. ● If asked for PIN code when connecting a Bluetooth device, enter <0000>. ● Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a time. ● The Bluetooth connection will be terminated when you turn the Soundbar off. ● The Soundbar may not perform Bluetooth search or connection correctly under the following circumstances: - If there is a strong electrical field around the Soundbar. 2. Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device you want to connect. (Refer to the Bluetooth device's user manual.) 3. Select the Stereo headset menu on the Bluetooth device. • You will see a list of scanned devices. 4. Select "[Samsung] Soundbar" from the list. • • • When the Soundbar is connected to the Bluetooth device, it will display BT READY [Bluetooth Device Name] BT on the front display. - If several Bluetooth devices are simultaneously paired with the Soundbar. - If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in place, or malfunctions. The device name can only be displayed in English. An underline " _ " will be displayed if the name is not in English. - Note that such devices as microwave ovens, wireless LAN adaptors, fluorescent lights, and gas stoves use the same frequency range as the Bluetooth device, which can cause electric interference. If the Bluetooth device has failed to pair with the Soundbar, delete the previous "[Samsung] Soundbar" found by the Bluetooth device and have it search for the Soundbar again. ● The Soundbar supports SBC data (44.1kHz, 48kHz). ● Connect only to a Bluetooth device that supports the A2DP (AV) function. ● You cannot connect the Soundbar to a Bluetooth device that supports only the HF (Hands Free) function. 5. Play music on the connected device. • You can listen to the music playing on the connected Bluetooth device over the Soundbar. • In BT mode, the Play/Pause/Next/Prev functions are not available. However, these functions are available in Bluetooth devices supporting AVRCP. 18 FUNCTIONS + To disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Soundbar You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Soundbar. For instructions, see the Bluetooth device's user manual. ● When the Soundbar is disconnected from the Bluetooth device, the Soundbar will display BT DISCONNECTED on the front display. + To disconnect the Soundbar from the Bluetooth device Press the (SOURCE) button on the remote control or the ( from BT to another mode or turn off the Soundbar. ) button on the product's front panel to switch ● The connected Bluetooth device will wait a certain amount of time for a response from the Soundbar before terminating the connection. (Disconnection time may differ, depending on the Bluetooth device) ● In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth connection will be lost if the distance between the Soundbar and the Bluetooth device exceeds 5 m. ● The Soundbar automatically turns off after 15 minutes in the Ready state. More About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetooth-compliant devices to interconnect easily with each other using a short wireless connection. ● A Bluetooth device may cause noise or malfunction, depending on usage, when: - A part of your body is in contact with the receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device or the Soundbar. - It is subject to electrical variation from obstructions caused by a wall, corner, or office partition. - It is exposed to electrical interference from same frequency-band devices including medical equipment, microwave ovens, and wireless LANs. ● Pair the Soundbar with the Bluetooth device while they are close together. ● The further the distance between the Soundbar and Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is. If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational range, the connection is lost. ● In poor reception areas, the Bluetooth connection may not work properly. ● The Bluetooth connection only works when it is close to the unit. The connection will be automatically cut off if the Bluetooth device is out of range. Even within range, the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such as walls or doors. ● This wireless device may cause electric interference during its operation. 19 ENG ● The Soundbar will be disconnected. FUNCTIONS NFC You can connect your Soundbar to an NFC-enabled smart device through a Bluetooth connection with a simple setup. Once connected, you can enjoy music stored in your smart device through the Soundbar. It is supported in some area’s models only. + Connecting with NFC and smart devices 1. Detach the NFC sticker label from the package and attach it to a desired spot. • Putting the NFC sticker within a 3m radius from the unit is recommanded. • Do not attach the NFC sticker on a metallic surface including the Soundbar. Metallic object may interfere with communication and the NFC sticker may not work properly. ) button on the main unit’s front panel or the 2. Press the ( the BT mode. (SOURCE) button on the remote control to select 3. Enable the NFC function of your smart device. 4. Bring your smart device’s NFC antenna close to the NFC label. 5. When the connection prompt appears on your smart device’s display, select <Yes>. • Once the connection is established, the completion message appears. ※ To reconnect once the initial connection had been successful, start from step 3. + Disconnecting NFC Bring your smart device’s NFC antenna close to the NFC label on the Soundbar again. The disconnection message appears on the smart device's display. + To connect another smart device to the Soundbar which is already connected to another NFC compatible device Bring the new smart device close to the NFC label of the Soundbar. ● The NFC function is implemented in Android v4.1.2 Jelly Bean and later operating systems. - To make NFC connections, your smart device needs both Android OS 4.1.2 Jelly Bean or later and the NFC tag for NFC function execution. You also need to download the "Samsung NFC Connection" application from the Google Play store and install it on your smart device. For further details, please refer to the smart device’s user manual. ● The location of the NFC antenna is different in different devices. Confirm the location of your smart device’s antenna in the device's user manual before attempting to pair it with the Soundbar. ● If your smart device is in a thick housing or case, the NFC connection may not be stable. ● The N-mark is a trade mark or registered trade mark of the NFC Forum Inc. in the United States and other countries. ● If you have trouble with an NFC connection - Actually touching your smart device to the NFC label can cause NFC connection failure. - If the "Empty tag" error is displayed on the smart device, please try again. - Check whether your smart device’s antenna is close enough to the NFC logo. ● If you turn off the Soundbar when the Network Standby On feature is ON, and then try to connect a Bluetooth device that has been previously connected using NFC, the Soundbar will turn on automatically when the device connects. To set the Network Standby On feature, see page 23. 20 FUNCTIONS TV SOUNDCONNECT + Connecting a TV to the Soundbar Connect 1. Turn on the TV and Soundbar. • Turn on the menu of the TV. • Move to Speaker Settings on "Sound" tab. • Set the "Add New Device" menu to "On". ) button on the main unit’s front panel 2. Press the ( (SOURCE) button on the remote control or the to select the TV mode. 3. On the TV, a message asking whether to enable the TV SoundConnect function. "[Samsung] Soundbar" is displayed on the TV screen. 4. Select <Yes> to finish connecting the TV and Soundbar by TV remote control. ● Switching the Soundbar’s mode from TV to another mode automatically terminates TV SoundConnect. ● To connect the Soundbar to another TV, the existing connection must be terminated. ● Terminate the connection to the existing TV, and then press the ► button on the remote control for 5 seconds to connect to another TV. 21 ● The TV SoundConnect (SoundShare) function is supported by some Samsung TVs released from 2012 on. Check whether your TV supports the TV SoundConnect (SoundShare) function before you begin. (For further information, refer to the TV’s user manual.) ● If your Samsung TV was released before 2014, check the SoundShare setting menu. ● If the distance between the TV and Soundbar exceeds 5 m, the connection may not be stable or the audio may stutter. If this occurs, relocate the TV or Soundbar so that they are within operational range, and then re-establish the TV SoundConnect connection. ● TV SoundConnect Operational Ranges: - Recommended pairing range: within 50 cm - Recommended operational range: within 5 m ● The Play/Pause, Next, Prev buttons are not operable in TV SoundConnect mode. ENG You can enjoy TV sound through your Soundbar when it is connected to a Samsung TV that supports the TV SoundConnect function. FUNCTIONS USB You can play music files located on USB storage devices through the Soundbar. USB port Display 1. Connect the USB device to the USB port of the product. ● Do not remove the USB device while it is transferring files. ) button on the main unit’s front panel 2. Press the ( (SOURCE) button on the remote control or the to select the USB mode. ● DRM-protected music files (MP3, WMA) from commercial web sites cannot be played. 3. USB appears on the display screen. ● Mobile phone devices are not supported. • The Soundbar connection to the USB device is complete. • The Soundbar automatically turns off (Auto Power Off) if no USB device has been connected for more than 15 minutes. ● External HDDs are not supported. ● File Format Type Compatibility list: Format *.mp3 MPEG 1 Layer3 MPEG 2 Layer3 MPEG 2.5 Layer3 + Before you connect a USB device *.wma Be aware of the following: Wave_Format_MSAudio1 Wave_Format_MSAudio2 AAC ● If the file name of a file or folder on a USB device exceeds 10 characters, it is not displayed on the Soundbar's display. *.aac AAC-LC HE-AAC ● This product may not be compatible with certain types of USB storage media. ● The Soundbar supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file systems. - Codec MPEG 1 Layer2 *.wav - *.ogg OGG 1.1.0 *.flac FLAC 1.1.0, FLAC 1.2.1 Supported Sampling Rate above 16KHz The NTFS file system is not supported. ● Connect USB devices directly to the USB port of the product. Otherwise, you may encounter a USB compatibility problem. ● Do not connect multiple storage devices to the product via a multi-card reader. It may not operate properly. ● Digital camera PTP protocols are not supported. 22 FUNCTIONS USING THE NETWORK STANDBY ON FUNCTION 1. Connect the Smart device to your Soundbar. 2. Turn the Network Standby On function on by pressing the $ button on the Soundbar remote for more than 5 seconds. You can turn the function off by pressing the $ button again for more than 5 seconds. ● Available only if the Soundbar is listed among the Smart device’s paired devices. (The Smart device and the Soundbar must have been previously paired at least once.) ● Soundbar will appear in the Smart device’s searched devices list only when the Soundbar is displaying [BT READY] or [WiFi READY]. ● In the TV SoundConnect mode, the Soundbar cannot be paired to another Smart device. ● If Network Standby On function did not work - The Network Standby On is set to Off. ● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be terminated if its power cord was disconnected or the power was cut off. Turn on the Soundbar and reconnect. USING THE AUTO POWER LINK FUNCTION If Soundbar was connected to an external device with optical cable, AUTO POWER LINK function can be used. If you connect the main unit to a TV with a digital optical cable, set the Auto Power function ON to have the Soundbar turn on automatically when you turn the TV on. 1. Connect the Soundbar and an External Device with an Optical cable. 2. Press and hold the DIMMER/Anynet+ button for over 5 seconds to toggle the function. 23 AUTO POWER LINK Display ON ANYNET+ OFF / POWER LINK ON OFF ANYNET+ ON / POWER LINK OFF ENG The Network Standby On function becomes available if wireless connection was properly established between the smart device and Soundbar. This function turns on the Soundbar automatically when a smart device attempts to connect to the Soundbar via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. If the Soundbar was turned on via Bluetooth connection, its input mode is set to BT automatically. Turning on the Soundbar via Wi-Fi is available only by using the App. For further information, refer to the Web manual. FUNCTIONS USING THE MULTIROOM LINK Once the Soundbar is connected to a smart device with Multiroom Link App, you can connect multiple Samsung Multiroom devices together wirelessly. + Before you begin Communication Basics Smart Device: Android or iOS (App Control) Internet Wireless Router 1. Requirements: Wireless Router, Smart Device 2. The wireless router should be connected to the Internet. 3. The smart device should be connected to the router via a Wi-Fi connection. + Installing the Samsung Multiroom App To use the Soundbar, you must download and then install the Samsung Multiroom App by accessing the app through Google play or the App Store. With the Samsung Multiroom App installed, you can play music stored in your smart device, from connected devices and other content providers, and from Internet radio stations. Android or iOS Accessing the Samsung Multiroom App Download the Samsung Multiroom app from Google Play or the App Store of your smart device. To access the Samsung Multiroom app, press the Multiroom app icon on your smart device. * Market search : Samsung Multiroom z t or ANDROID APP ON 24 FUNCTIONS + Connecting with Soundbar Connecting the Soundbar to Your Network with a LAN Cable Plug In LAN Wireless Router 1. Connect your smart device to your Wi-Fi network. 2. On your Smart device, select the Samsung Multiroom app. Setup starts. 3. In the app, select "I don’t have a Hub", and then press Next. On the next screen, select Soundbar from the device type, and then press Next. 4. Select Wired from the network type, and then press Next. 5. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the Soundbar’s LAN port. Connect the other end to your wireless router. (You cannot use the Soundbar without a wireless router.) 6. Plug the Soundbar into an electrical outlet. ● For further information on connecting the Soundbar with a wired/wireless router, refer to the manual on the Web. ● For further information on connecting the product for Multiroom Link, please refer to the web-based user manual or manual provided within the app. - Web manual : www.Samsung.com Support Product name search HW-H750 or HW-H751 PDF file download. 25 ENG Connect the Soundbar to a wired/wireless router. Wired or wireless connection (using Wi-Fi SETUP or WPS, you can see the guide on Multiroom APP) to the router can be established. FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE UPDATE ● Updating firmware may not work properly if audio files supported by the Soundbar are stored in the USB storage device. ● Do not disconnect the power or remove the USB device while updates are being applied. The main unit will turn off automatically after completing the firmware update. ● After reset, all settings are reset to their factory default settings. We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the update. Note that updating firmware resets subwoofer connection too. If connection to the subwoofer is not established automatically after resetting, refer to page 13. If the firmware fails to update, we recommend formatting the USB device in FAT16 and trying again. ● Do not format the USB device in the NTFS format. The Soundbar does not support the NTFS file system. ● Depending on the manufacturer, some USB devices may not be supported. + Updating with USB Samsung may offer updates for the Soundbar's system firmware in the future. If an update is offered, you can update the firmware by connecting a USB device with the firmware update stored on it to the USB port on your Soundbar. Note that if there are multiple update files, you must load them onto the USB device singly and use them to update the firmware one file at a time. Please visit Samsung.com or contact the Samsung call center to receive more information about downloading updates files. 1. While the Soundbar is turned off, connect the USB storage device that contains the updating firmware to the Soundbar’s USB port. + Auto update 2. Turn on the Soundbar UPDATE appears on the display and updating begins within 3 minutes. Even when the Soundbar is turned off, the Soundbar will automatically check latest software version and continue to update if it was connected to the Internet. • Upon completion of updating, the Soundbar turns off and on automatically. ● The Soundbar is configured to run auto update by default. ● To use auto update function, the Soundbar must be connected to the Internet. ● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be terminated if its power cord was disconnected or the power was cut off. Turn on the Soundbar and reconnect. If UPDATE was not displayed 1. Turn off the Soundbar, connect the USB storage device that contains update files to the Soundbar’s USB port. 2. Disconnect the power cord, reconnect it and turn it on. 26 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING ENG Before requesting service, please check the following. The unit will not turn on. Connect the power plug to the outlet. • Is the power cord plugged into the outlet? A function does not work when the button is pressed. Disconnect the power plug and connect it again. • Is there static electricity in the air? Sound is not produced. • Is the Mute function on? Press the Mute button to cancel the function. • Is the volume set to minimum? Adjust the Volume. The remote control does not work. • Are the batteries drained? Replace with new batteries. • Is the distance between the remote control and main unit too far? Move closer to the unit. The TV SoundConnect (TV pairing) failed. • Does your TV support TV SoundConnect? TV SoundConnect is supported by some Samsung TVs released from 2012 on. Check your TV to see if it supports TV SoundConnect. • Is your TV firmware the latest version? Update your TV with the latest firmware. • Does an error occur when connecting? Contact the Samsung call centre. • Reset the TV MODE and connect again. Press and hold the ► button for 5 seconds to reset the TV SoundConnect connection. The red LED on the subwoofer blinks and the subwoofer is not producing sound. Try to connect your subwoofer again. (See Page 13) • Your subwoofer may not be connected to the main body of the product. The subwoofer drones and vibrates noticeably. Press the WOOFER button on your remote control to adjust its value (between SW-6 and SW+6). • Try to adjust the vibration of your subwoofer. 27 APPENDIX APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS Model name HW-H750, HW-H751 USB Weight GENERAL Dimensions (W x H x D) 5V/0.5A Main Unit 3.3 kg Subwoofer (PS-WH750, PS-WH751) 9.8 kg Main Unit 943 x 123 x 57 mm Subwoofer (PS-WH750, PS-WH751) 305.5 x 388.5 x 305.5 mm Operating Temperature Range +5 °C to +35 °C Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 % Rated Output Power AMPLIFIER Main Front 40W/CH, 6 OHM, THD = 1%, 1kHz Main Bottom 40W/CH, 6 OHM, THD = 1%, 1kHz Subwoofer (PS-WH750, PS-WH751) 160W, 3 OHM, THD = 10%, 100Hz S/N Ratio (Analogue Input) 65 dB Separation (1kHz) 65 dB * S/N ratio, distortion, separation, and usable sensitivity are based on measurements using AES (Audio Engineering Society) guidelines. * Nominal specification - Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice. - Weight and dimensions are approximate. - For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. ※ Open Source License Notice For further information on Open Sources used in this product, please visit the website: http://opensource.samsung.com 28 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care Centre. Contact Centre Area ` Asia Pacific AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND CHINA HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA JAPAN MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES SINGAPORE THAILAND TAIWAN VIETNAM ` MENA U.A.E OMAN KUWAIT BAHRAIN QATAR EGYPT ALGERIA PAKISTAN TUNISIA JORDAN SYRIA IRAN MOROCCO 1300 362 603 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) 400-810-5858 (852) 3698 4698 1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free 1800 266 8282 - Toll Free 30308282 - Non Toll Free 0800112888 021-56997777 0120-327-527 1800-88-9999 1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT] 1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile] 02-4222111 [Other landline] 1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) 0-2689-3232, 1800-29-3232 0800-32-9999 1800 588 889 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) 183-2255 (183-CALL) 8000-4726 800-2255 (800-CALL) 08000-726786 16580 021 36 11 00 0800-Samsung (72678) 80-1000-12 0800-22273 06 5777444 18252273 021-8255 080 100 2255 SAUDI ARABIA 920021230 TURKEY ` Africa NIGERIA 444 77 11 Ghana Cote D’ Ivoire SENEGAL CAMEROON KENYA UGANDA TANZANIA RWANDA BURUNDI DRC SUDAN SOUTH AFRICA BOTSWANA NAMIBIA ZAMBIA MOZAMBIQUE 0800-726-7864 0800-10077 0302-200077 8000 0077 800-00-0077 7095- 0077 0800 545 545 0800 300 300 0685 88 99 00 9999 200 499999 1969 0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864) 8007260000 08 197 267 864 0211 350370 847267864 / 827267864 Web Site www.samsung.com/au/support www.samsung.com/nz/support www.samsung.com/cn/support www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese) www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/in/support www.samsung.com/id/support www.samsung.com/jp/support www.samsung.com/my/support www.samsung.com/ph/support www.samsung.com/sg/support www.samsung.com/th/support www.samsung.com/tw/support www.samsung.com/vn/support www.samsung.com/ae/support (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic) www.samsung.com/eg/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/pk/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/iran/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/sa/support www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/tr/support www.samsung.com/africa_en/support www.samsung.com/africa_fr/support www.samsung.com/support www.samsung.com/support HW-H750 HW-H751 ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ Wireless Audio - Soundbar ﺗﺧﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺷﻛﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ. ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ www.samsung.com/register AH68-02725V-03 3:16:18 2014-10-24 AH68-02725V-03 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 1 ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ TV SoundConnect ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ TV SoundConnectﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Soundbarﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ،Bluetoothﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. HDMI ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ HDMIﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ،ﻭﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ARCﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ Soundbarﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ .HDMIﻭﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .ARC ) Surround Sound Expansionﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ( ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ. ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Sonic Emotion ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻭﻋﻭﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ – ) CINEMAﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ( ) SPORTS /ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ( ) VOICE /ﺻﻭﺕ( ) MUSIC /ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( STANDARD / )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ( – ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻪ. ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ. ﺩﻋﻡ )(USB Host ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ) (USBﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ) ،(MP3ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺿﺔ )،(USB flash memory ﺇﻟﺦ .ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ).(Soundbar's USB HOST ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ،ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ! NFC ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFCﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ .Soundbarﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ. Multiroom Link ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ. ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ Dolby .Dolby Laboratoriesﻭﺭﻣﺯ double-Dﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ .Dolby Laboratories ﻟﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ) (DTSﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ .http://patents.dts.comﺻُﻧﻌﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ،DTS .DTS Licensing Limitedﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ،ﻭ DTS ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭ DTS 2.0 Channelﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ .DTSﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) (HDMIﻭ ) ،(HDMI High-Definition Multimediaﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ) (HDMIﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ) (HDMI Licensing LLCﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ Samsungﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ).([email protected] ۲ 3:16:26 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 2 ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ARA ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(. ﻓﻼ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ .ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ. ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ "ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺧﻁﻳﺭ" ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ :ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ :ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﺃﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ. • ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ٍ ً ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. • ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ • ﻻ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﺛﺭﻫﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ،ﻛﺂﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﺭﻱ .ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ً ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ. ۳ 3:16:26 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 3 ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ 68.6 mm 99.1mm 99.1mm 99.1mm ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ )ﺃﺛﺎﺙ( ،ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻟﻪ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ۷ﺇﻟﻰ ۱۰ﺳﻡ .ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ .ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ،ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ .ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﻫﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ .ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ. ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ )ﺁﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ( ،ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﺄﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ .ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ .ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺗﺎء ،ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ. ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ. ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺣﺭﻗﻬﺎ. ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ. ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ. ٤ 3:16:26 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 4 ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ARA ۲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ۲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ۱۷ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ۱۷ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ۱۷ (HDMI OUT) ARC ۳ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ۱۸ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ۳ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ۲۰ NFC ٤ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ۲۱ TV SoundConnect ۲۲ USB ٦ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۲۳ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Network Standby On ٦ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ۲۳ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ AUTO POWER LINK ٦ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ۲٤ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Multiroom Link ۲٦ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۷ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ۷ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ/ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ۸ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ۹ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ۹ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ۲۷ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ۲۸ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ۲۸ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ۱۱ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ۱۱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ۱۲ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ۱۲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ۱۳ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ۱٥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ HDMI ۱٦ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ )ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ )ﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ۱٦ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ. ● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﺳﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) (aﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ(. ) (bﺇﺣﺿﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ(. ● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻙ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ. ٥ 3:16:27 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 5 ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ. _ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ. _ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ (1ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ) .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (۳ (2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ) .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (۲۷ _ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ 2014ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ. ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. )ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ(1EA : )ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ(1EA : ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ /ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ) 3ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(CR2032 : ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ )ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ(2EA :1 )ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ(2EA :2 ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻛﺑﻝ AUX ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFC ● ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ٦ 10:51:06 2014-10-28 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141028.indd 6 ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ARA ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ/ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ AUX IN ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ .USB input ،TV ،BT ،HDMI ،AUX ،D.IN ( ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺷﻐﻠﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) ۳ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻟﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﺛﺎﺑﺔ ﺯﺭ) MUTEﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺯﺭ) MUTEﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ،ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) ( ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ۳ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ )ﻣﻧﻔﺫ (USB ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ USBﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ MP3ﻫﻧﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ. AUX IN AUX ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ/ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ. ● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۱٥ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،BT READY TV READYﻭ .USB ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ. ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar ● ● ● ● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ،ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۱۰ﺇﻟﻰ ۱۲ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻸﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻧﺎ. ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء USBﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺃﻭ .AUX ۷ 3:16:30 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 7 ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ WPS/Wi-Fi SETUP ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbar ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ WPSﺃﻭ .Wi-Fi ) DC 24Vﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ﺯﺭ SPK ADD ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ. )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ( LAN ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ .LAN HDMI IN ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ .HDMIﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ. (TV) HDMI OUT ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ .HDMI OPTICAL IN ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. ● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ،ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ .ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ. ● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ. ۸ 3:16:39 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 8 ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ARA ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ SOURCE ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Soundbar MUTE ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ. REPEAT ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) REPEATﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ .USB : REPEAT OFFﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Repeatﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ(. : REPEAT FILEﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ. : REPEAT ALLﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ. : REPEAT RANDOMﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ. )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(. ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ،ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ،$ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ. AUDIO SYNC ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻭﺑﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ AUDIO SYNCﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ .ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ #,$ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ۰ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭ ۳۰۰ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،USBﻭﺿﻊ TVﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ،BTﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) Audio Syncﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Wi-Fi SETUPﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ AUDIO SYNCﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ٍ ۷ DIMMER/Anynet+ : DIMMERﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺯﺭ DIMMER/Anynet+ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ DIMMERﻟﻣﺩﺓ 30ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. : Anynet+ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ DIMMER/Anynet+ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Anynet+ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ AUTO POWER LINK ﻣﻥ ٍ 5 ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Anynet+ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ Soundbar ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ .Anynet+ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻛﺑﻝ .HDMI ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ 23ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ .AUTO POWER LINK TREBLE BASS ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﻳﺭ .ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ #,$ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ 3-ﺇﻟﻰ .3+ ● ﺍﺳﻡ Soundbarﻫﻭ ﻣﻠﻙ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ .Samsung ● ﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ۹ 3:16:41 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 9 ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ POWER ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar VOLUME ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ،ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ،#ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ. ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. SOUND EFFECT ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ. ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ STANDARDﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ،(STANDARDﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. WOOFER ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ #،$ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ SW -6ﺇﻟﻰ .SW +6 ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ SPK ADDﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ WOOFERﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ٍ ٥ ) Surr.Soundﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ( ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ Surr.Soundﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻙ ﻟـ :SURROUND SOUND AUTOﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ SURROUND SOUND ONﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻗﻧﺎﺗﻲ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ SURROUND SOUND OFFﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ WPSﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. Surr.Soundﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ٍ ٥ _ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ .۱ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. .۲ﺭ ﱢﻛﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ۳ﻓﻭﻟﺕ .ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺏ ) (+ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ' 'ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. .۳ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ. ۱۰ 3:16:41 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 10 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ARA ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. _ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ. ● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ،ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ. ● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻗﻭ ًّﻳﺎ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺟﺻﻳﺔ ،ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ،ﺇﻟﺦ.(. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ٥ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ● ِ Soundbarﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. - ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ٥ :ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ - ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ :ﻳُﻭﺻﻰ ﺑـ ۳٥ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ .ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ. .۱ﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺑﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. • ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳًﺎ. • ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ٥ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. .۲ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻠﻡ ،ﺛﻡ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ. .۳ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻧﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ. • ﺍﻟﺳﻧﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ. .٤ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ Soundbar ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺱ ،ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ. .٥ﻗﺩ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ Soundbarﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ .ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء .USB AUX .٦ﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ Soundbarﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Soundbarﻣﻊ ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ]ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ Soundbarﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ[ ۱۱ 3:16:42 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 11 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ .۱ﺍﺳﺣﺏ Soundbarﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻟﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Soundbarﻣﻊ ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ Soundbarﻋﻥ ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ[ ● ● ● ● ● ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺎﺵَ ﺃﻱ ﺩﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ،ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ٥ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﻙ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ،ﻓﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ. ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ٥ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ٥ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ۱٦ﺳﻡ ۱۷٫٥ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ۳۲٫۸ﺇﻟﻰ ۳۳٫٥ﺳﻡ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ .۱ﺿﻊ "ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ. .۲ﺿﻊ "ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ "ﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ/ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ" ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻓﺎﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ۱ﻭ ،۲ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. .۳ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ. ۱۲ 3:16:44 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 12 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ARA ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ( ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ LINKﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺿﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ۳۰ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ. .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ. .۲ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .(STANDBY ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. .۳ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ID SETﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﺑﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ٍ ٥ • ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ) LINKﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ. ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ .٤ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،(STANDBYﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ) MUTE ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺧﻣﺱ ٍ .٥ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ID SETﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Soundbar .٦ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺑﺔ ) LINKﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. • ﺗﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ( ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. • ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ) LINKﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ LINKﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻓﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﻓﺷﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ .ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ۲ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ) .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (۱۰ ۱۳ 3:16:44 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 13 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ● ● ● ● ● ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ ،ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ) STANDBY LEDﻟﻣﺑﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ) LINKﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ( )ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۳۰ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ۲٫٤) Soundbarﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ 10ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ،ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ٦ - ۱ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ. ● ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ .ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ. ● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ. ۱٤ 3:16:46 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 14 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ HDMI ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ HDMI OUT ARA ﻳﻌﺩ HDMIﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ،ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ،DVDﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ،Blu-rayﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ،set top boxesﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ. ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ HDMIﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ -ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻼ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ. HDMI IN ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMI )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ( HDMI IN )HDMI OUT (TV ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMI )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ( HDMI IN (HDMI OUT) ARC ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ) HDMIﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ HDMI INﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ HDMI OUTﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ. ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ARCﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ .(ARC) HDMI OUT ﻭ، ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .ARC (TV) HDMI OUT ● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .Anynet+ ● ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ HDMIﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ .ARC ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ) HDMIﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ (TV) HDMI OUTﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ HDMI INﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ● ﻳﻌﺩ HDMIﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ. ۱٥ 3:16:46 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 15 ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ )ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ )ﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ optical inﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ analogue inﻟﻠﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. OPTICAL OUT OPTICAL IN ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ )ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ( /BDﻣﺷﻐﻝ /DVD /Set-top box ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ AUDIO OUT AUX IN ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ OPTICAL IN ﺃﻭ، ﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ) OPTICAL INﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ OPTICAL OUTﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ. ﻗﻣﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔﺇﻟﻰ.D.IN AUX IN ● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ. ● ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ. ﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ) AUX INﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ AUDIO OUTﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ. ﻗﻣﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔﺇﻟﻰ.AUX ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ، ﻭﻣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﻟﺗﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻣﺔ. DC 24V DC 24V ۱٦ 3:16:47 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 16 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ D.IN ﻣﺩﺧﻝ AUX AUX ) (SOURCEﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ. ARA ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: ● ﻭﺿﻊ ARC/USB/TV/BT/HDMI/D.IN - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۱٥ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ● ﻭﺿﻊ AUX ﻣﺩﺧﻝ HDMI HDMI - ﻭﺿﻊ BLUETOOTH BT - TV SoundConnect TV ﻭﺿﻊ USB USB ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۸ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ .AUX ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ AUXﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ۱٥ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ● ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ،Auto Power down Offﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ & ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .AUX ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ٍ 5 (HDMI OUT) ARC ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ) ARCﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ .(ARC) HDMI OUT ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMI .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ARCﺑـ Soundbarﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ .HDMI .۲ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Anynet+ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ .Soundbar .۳ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (SOURCEﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .D.IN ● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ HDMIﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ،ARCﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ARCﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ. ● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ARCﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .Anynet+ ۱۷ 10:51:23 2014-10-28 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141028.indd 17 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ،ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ! _ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ. ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .۱ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (SOURCEﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .BT ● .۲ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ. )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ(. ● ● ● .۳ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ. • ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. .٤ﺍﺧﺗﺭ " "[Samsung] Soundbarﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ] BT READYﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ[ BT ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ " _ " ﻭﺗﺣﺗﻪ ﺧﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ،Soundbarﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﺫﻑ " "[Samsung] Soundbarﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ،ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ. ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ،ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕﻭﺻﻼﺕ LANﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ،ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ،ﻭﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ. .٥ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) BTﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ( ،ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ) Playﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( / ) Pauseﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ( ) Next /ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ) Prev /ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ(. ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ).(AVRCP ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺭﻗﻡ PINﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻝ >.<0000 ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ. ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺟﺭﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ Bluetoothﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ.Soundbar ● ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ٤٤٫۱) SBCﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ، ٤۸ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(. ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ A2DP )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(. ● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetooth ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) HFﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(. ۱۸ 3:17:00 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 18 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ _ ﻟﻔﺻﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbar ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbarﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ. ARA ● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar ● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ BT DISCONNECTEDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ. _ ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ) (SOURCEﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ BTﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ● ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ. )ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ،ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ( ● ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﺳﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺧﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ٥ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ. ● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ۱٥ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ) Readyﺍﻟﺗﺄﻫﺏ(. ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ Bluetooth ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ. ● ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻝ ،ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ: - ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ ﻣﻼﻣﺳًﺎ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar - ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ،ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺑﻳﺔ. - ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ،ﻭﻭﺻﻼﺕ LANﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ. ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ. ● ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ،ﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ. ● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺿﻌﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ. ● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ .ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺧﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ .ﺣﺗﻰ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ. ● ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ۱۹ 3:17:14 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 19 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ NFC ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFCﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ .ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbarﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ. _ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ NFCﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ .۱ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFCﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺿﻠﻬﺎ. • ﻳﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFCﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ۳ﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ NFCﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ .Soundbar ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ NFCﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. .۲ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (SOURCEﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .BT .۳ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFCﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. .٤ﻗﺭﱢﺏ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ NFCﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ .NFC .٥ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ >.<Yes • ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ،ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ. aﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ .3 _ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFC ﻗﺭﱢﺏ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ NFCﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFCﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ .ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. _ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFC ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFCﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ .Soundbar ● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NFCﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Android v4.1.2 Jelly Beanﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ. ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ،NFCﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Androidﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ Jelly Bean 4.1.2ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ NFCﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .NFCﻭﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ " "Samsung NFC Connectionﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ Google Play storeﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ .ﻭﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. ● ● ● ● ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ NFCﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻵﺧﺭ .ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ NFCﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭً ﺍ. ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ Nﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ NFC Forumﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ NFC ﺇﻥ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ NFCﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ .NFC ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Empty tagﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ. -ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ .NFC ● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ،Network Standby Onﺛﻡ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،NFCﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ،Network Standby Onﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .۲۳ ۲۰ 3:17:15 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 20 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ TV SOUNDCONNECT ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ Samsungﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .TV SoundConnect ARA _ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbar ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ .Soundbar • ﻗﻣﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. • ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻺﻟﯩﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔﻣﻧﻌﻼﻣﺔﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ "ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ". • ﺍﺿﺑﻁﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ "ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺟﻬﺎﺯﺟﺩﻳﺩ" ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ". ● ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .۲ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (SOURCEﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .TV .۳ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ،ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺄﻟﻙ ﻋﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "[Samsung] Soundbar" .TV SoundConnectﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ● .٤ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ > <Yesﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ Soundbarﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. ● ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺳﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .TV SoundConnect ● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ،ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ. ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ٥ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ. ● ● ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )TV SoundConnect (SoundShare ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ Samsungﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ًء ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻡ .2012ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ) TV SoundConnect (SoundShareﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء. )ﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ Samsungﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ،2014ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ .SoundShare ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbar ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ 5ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .TV SoundConnect ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ TV SoundConnect ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ :ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ 50ﺳﻡ -ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ :ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ 5ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ● ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ) Pause/Playﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(، ) Nextﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ() Prev ،ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ( ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .TV SoundConnect ۲۱ 3:17:25 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 21 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ USB ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ USBﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ .Soundbar ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ USB .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. .۲ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ) (SOURCEﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .USB ● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ )ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ MP3ﻭ (WMAﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﱠ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ DRM ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ. .۳ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ. • ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ .USB • ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ) (Auto Power Offﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ۱٥ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. ● ﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ) (HDDsﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. ● ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. ● ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﺯ MPEG 1 Layer2 MPEG 1 Layer3 _ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB *.mp3 ● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ۱۰ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ،ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .Soundbar ● ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ .USB *.wma ● ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT16ﻭ FAT32ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. *.aac ● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ .ﺧﻼ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺎﺩﻑ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ .USB *.wav - *.ogg OGG 1.1.0 *.flac FLAC 1.1.0, FLAC 1.2.1 MPEG 2.5 Layer3 ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: - MPEG 2 Layer3 Wave_Format_MSAudio1 Wave_Format_MSAudio2 AAC AAC-LC HE-AAC ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ NTFSﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ. ● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ. ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻓﻭﻕ 16ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ ● ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻻﺕ PTPﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ. ۲۲ 3:17:32 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 22 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ NETWORK STANDBY ON ARA ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Network Standby Onﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭ .Soundbarﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑـ Soundbarﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Bluetoothﺃﻭ .Wi-Fiﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ،Bluetoothﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ BTﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ .ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Wi-Fiﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ. ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ. .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑـ Soundbarﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ. ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. .۲ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Network Standby Onﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ #ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ Soundbarﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ٍ ٥ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ #ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ٍ ٥ ● ● ● ● ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Soundbarﻣﺩﺭﺟً ﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. )ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭ Soundbarﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ(. ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ] [BT READYﺃﻭ ].[WiFi READY ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،TV SoundConnectﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ Network Standby Onﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ -ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ Network Standby Onﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Wi-Fiﺑـ Soundbarﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ AUTO POWER LINK ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ Soundbarﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ .AUTO POWER LINK ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ،ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ. .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ. AUTO POWER LINK .۲ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ DIMMER/Anynet+ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ. ٍ ٥ ON OFF ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ / ANYNET+ OFF POWER LINK ON / ANYNET+ ON POWER LINK OFF ۲۳ 3:17:46 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 23 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ MULTIROOM LINK ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ. _ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ: Androidﺃﻭ iOS )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ( ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ .۱ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ :ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ،ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ .۲ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ. .۳ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ .Wi-Fi _ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Samsung Multiroom ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،Soundbarﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Samsung Multiroomﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ Google playﺃﻭ .App Storeﻭﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ،Samsung Multiroomﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ،ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻓﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ،ﻭﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ. Androidﺃﻭ iOS ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Samsung Multiroom ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Samsung Multiroomﻣﻥ Google playﺃﻭ App Storeﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ،Samsung Multiroomﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Multiroomﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ. * ﺍﻟﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻕSamsung Multiroom : z t ﺃﻭ ANDROID APP ON ۲٤ 3:17:46 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 24 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ _ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbar ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ LAN ARA ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ /ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ .ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Wi-Fi SETUPﺃﻭ ،WPSﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ).((Samsung Multiroom APP ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ LAN ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ .۱ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ Wi-Fiﻟﺩﻳﻙ. .۲ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ .Samsung Multiroomﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ. .۳ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ،ﺣﺩﺩ " ،"I don’t have a Hubﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ .Nextﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ،ﺣﺩﺩ Soundbarﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ .Next .٤ﺣﺩﺩ Wiredﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ .Next .٥ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ LANﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ LANﺑـ .Soundbarﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ. )ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Soundbarﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ(. .٦ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ. ● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ Soundbarﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ/ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ. ● ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ،ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ. -ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ www.Samsung.com :ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ HW-H750ﺃﻭ .HW-H751 ۲٥ 3:17:47 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 25 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ● ● ● _ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ USB ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ Samsungﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ Soundbarﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑـ .Soundbar ● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ،ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ. ● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ Soundbarﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ .USB ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ .ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ. ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ،ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ .ﻧﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ. ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ،ﻓﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ .۱۳ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺷﻠﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻓﻲ FAT16ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ .NTFSﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Soundbarﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .NTFS ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ،ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ USBﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣًﺎ. ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ Samsung.comﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ. _ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .۱ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،Soundbarﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ USBﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ .Soundbar USB ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،Soundbarﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﻳﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ. .۲ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbar UPDATEﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ۳ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ. • ● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ Soundbarﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ. ● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ Soundbarﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ. ● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ Wi-Fiﺑـ Soundbarﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ،ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Soundbarﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ UPDATE .۱ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،Soundbarﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ USBﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ USBﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. .۲ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ،ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ۲٦ 3:17:48 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 26 ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ARA ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ؟ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء؟ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ. • ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ؟ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ) Muteﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ. • ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ؟ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ. • ﻫﻝ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺷﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ؟ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ. • ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺟ ًّﺩﺍ؟ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ) TV SoundConnectﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(. • ﻫﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ TV SoundConnect؟ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ TV SoundConnectﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ Samsungﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ .2012ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ .TV SoundConnect • ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ؟ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﺑﺄﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ. • ﻫﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ؟ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ. • ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ) TV MODEﻭﺿﻊ (TVﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻟﻣﺩﺓ 5ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ .TV SoundConnect ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ. • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ. ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ) .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ (۱۳ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳُﺻﺩﺭ ﻁﻧﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻭﻳﻬﺗﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ WOOFERﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ )ﺑﻳﻥ SW-6ﻭ.(SW+6 • ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ۲۷ 3:17:55 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 27 ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ HW-H751 ،HW-H750 USB ﻋﺎﻡ ٥ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ۰٫٥ /ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ۳٫۳ﻛﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )(PS-WH751 ،PS-WH750 ۹٫۸ﻛﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ( ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ٥۷ × ۱۲۳ × ۹٤۳ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ۳۰٥٫٥ × ۳۸۸٫٥ × ۳۰٥٫٥ﻣﻠﻡ )(PS-WH751 ،PS-WH750 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ +٥ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ +۳٥ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ۱۰٪ﺇﻟﻰ ۷٥٪ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ،٦ OHM ،٤۰W/CHﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ = ۱ ،٪۱ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ،٦ OHM ،٤۰W/CHﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ = ۱ ،٪۱ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،۳ OHM ،۱٦۰Wﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ = ۱۰۰ ،٪۱۰ﻫﺭﺗﺯ )(PS-WH751 ،PS-WH750 ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺟﻳﺞ )ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻼﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ( ٦٥ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ) 1ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ٦٥ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ * ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺟﻳﺞ ،ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ،ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ) AESﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ(. * ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ - ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ. - ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ. - ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. aﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ،ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ: http://opensource.samsung.com ۲۸ 3:17:55 2014-10-24 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 28 ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ . ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯﺧﺩﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ،ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ Contact Centre Area ` Asia Pacific AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND CHINA 1300 362 603 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) 400-810-5858 HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698 INDIA INDONESIA JAPAN MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES SINGAPORE THAILAND TAIWAN VIETNAM ` MENA U.A.E OMAN KUWAIT BAHRAIN QATAR 1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free 1800 266 8282 - Toll Free 30308282 - Non Toll Free 0800112888 021-56997777 0120-327-527 1800-88-9999 1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT] 1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile] 02-4222111 [Other landline] 1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) 0-2689-3232, 1800-29-3232 0800-32-9999 1800 588 889 SYRIA IRAN MOROCCO 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) 183-2255 (183-CALL) 8000-4726 800-2255 (800-CALL) 08000-726786 16580 021 36 11 00 0800-Samsung (72678) 80-1000-12 0800-22273 06 5777444 18252273 021-8255 080 100 2255 SAUDI ARABIA 920021230 TURKEY ` Africa NIGERIA 444 77 11 EGYPT ALGERIA PAKISTAN TUNISIA JORDAN Ghana Cote D’ Ivoire SENEGAL CAMEROON KENYA UGANDA TANZANIA RWANDA BURUNDI DRC SUDAN SOUTH AFRICA BOTSWANA NAMIBIA ZAMBIA MOZAMBIQUE 0800-726-7864 0800-10077 0302-200077 8000 0077 800-00-0077 7095- 0077 0800 545 545 0800 300 300 0685 88 99 00 9999 200 499999 1969 0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864) 8007260000 08 197 267 864 0211 350370 847267864 / 827267864 HW-H750_H751_UM_ARA_141024.indd 29 Web Site www.samsung.com/au/support www.samsung.com/nz/support www.samsung.com/cn/support www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese) www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/in/support www.samsung.com/id/support www.samsung.com/jp/support www.samsung.com/my/support www.samsung.com/ph/support www.samsung.com/sg/support www.samsung.com/th/support www.samsung.com/tw/support www.samsung.com/vn/support www.samsung.com/ae/support (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic) www.samsung.com/eg/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/pk/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English) www.samsung.com/iran/support www.samsung.com/n_africa/support www.samsung.com/sa/support www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English) www.samsung.com/tr/support www.samsung.com/africa_en/support www.samsung.com/africa_fr/support www.samsung.com/support www.samsung.com/support 2014-10-24 3:17:55
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
Download PDF
advertisement